2009 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, and the name SRX are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes to
the product after that time without notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25788124 A First Printing
©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
{ CAUTION:
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the horizontal control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the horizontal control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire horizontal control up or down.
The vertical control is used for reclining the seatback.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
Vehicles with heated front seats have controls located
on the driver and passenger doors, near the door
handle.
The vehicle may have this
feature. The driver and
passenger seatback
lumbar support can be
adjusted by moving
the control located on the
outboard side of the
seat cushions.
I (Heated Seatback): Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings and to turn the heat to
the seatback off. Indicator lights next to the button
show the heat level selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings and to turn
the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights next to the button
show the heat level selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Adjust the seat as needed.
The appropriate heated seat or seatback button will
need to be pressed every time the vehicle is started.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall the stored
settings.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
Vehicles with the memory feature have buttons located
on the driver door.
Press either button to recall the stored setting.
Each time a memory button is pressed, a single beep
will sound.
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.
2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.
To recall the stored positions when unlocking the
vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 3-60.
S : Recalls the easy exit position.
To program the buttons:
To stop recall movement of the memory feature,
press one of the power seat or mirror controls.
1. Adjust the driver seat including the seatback
recliner, both outside mirrors, and the throttle
Easy Exit Seat
S Press the exit button to recall the exit position when
the vehicle is in P (Park). You will hear a beep.
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Two beeps confirm that the settings have been
saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the front passenger seat has a manual reclining
seatback, the lever used to operate it is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback:
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to the
upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the
seat and wear your safety belt properly.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, use the
vertical power seat control located on the outboard side
of each seat.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the restraint up to
raise it. To lower it, press
the button, located on
the top of the seatback,
and push the head
restraint down.
The front seat head restraints can also tilt forward and
rearward. The second row seat head rests do not tilt.
The third row seat head rests can be removed from
the seatback. To do this, press the button, located on
the top of the seatback, and pull them out from the
seatback. Store the head rest, front side facing up, in
the compartment behind the third row, by inserting
the head rest posts into the slots in the storage area.
Pull up or push down to adjust the second and third row
seat head rests, if the vehicle has them.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger side of the second row seat has an easy
entry feature, making it easy to get in and out of the
third row seat, if the vehicle has one.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Adjusting the Second Row Seat
The second row seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Pull up on the lever under the seat cushion and
slide the seat. Release the lever and try to move the seat
forward and rearward to be sure it is locked into place.
To operate the seat, pull the release handle located on
the top of the seatback. Fold the seatback forward,
then pull the release handle on the top of the seatback
to release the seat to tumble forward.
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat
{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before folding or unfolding the third row seat, all of the
following conditions must be met:
Stowable Seat
If the vehicle has a third row seat, it is a power
folding seat.
• The liftgate or passenger side rear door must
be open.
The head rests must be removed before folding the
for more information.
• The unlock button on either the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the door must be
pressed three times to enable the rear seat for
two minutes, or the ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The buttons to operate the power folding third row seat
are inside the liftgate and behind the second row
seat on the passenger side of the vehicle.
• The vehicle must be in P (Park).
• The vehicle cannot have a low battery.
e : Press to tilt the seatback forward or rearward.
f : Press to fold the seat.
After the seat is folded, fold the panel on the seat
forward flat on the floor.
If the seat’s path is blocked, it will stop and back away.
Press the button again to return the seat to its
previous position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Before returning the third row seat to the passenger
seating position, the panel must be folded back
upon itself. Press and hold one of the power folding
seat buttons and the seat will unfold into the seating
position. If the seat is not unfolded fully into the seating
position, a chime will sound when the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). This indicates that the seat is not
ready for a passenger.
Replace the head rests.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should
be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,
tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you
can buckle the belt.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten
the lap belt on smaller occupants.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each of the rear outside
passenger positions in the second row. Here is how
to install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located on the
seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
on the seatback.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
{ CAUTION:
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{ CAUTION:
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
CAUTION: (Continued)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
Each outboard seating position in the second row has
exposed metal lower anchors in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located near the
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Second Row
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in
this manual.
There are two top tether anchors located on the side of
the wheel well in the rear cargo area. There is another
top tether anchor in the center of the rear cargo area.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
{ CAUTION:
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
under the head restraint
and in between the
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
head restraint posts.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
in between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-43 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
more information on this, including important safety
information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-33.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
{ CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
All airbags are designed to work with safety belts,
but do not replace them.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They are
not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in
rear crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your vehicle,
during a vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal
impact. They are not designed to inflate in rear
crashes.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle. To read
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact
airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or
in a severe frontal impact.
Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag
that adjusts the restraint according to crash severity and
seat location using electronic frontal sensor(s) and
other special sensors which enable the sensing system
to monitor the position of the front passenger seat.
The passenger airbag inflates to a reduced depth when
the passenger seat is in a forward position. For more
rearward front seating positions, the passenger airbag
may inflate to an increased depth (a full deployment),
based on the crash severity measured early in the event.
(Always wear your safety belt, even with frontal
airbags.)
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is
determined by the direction of the roll.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there
are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-9.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,
which helps the passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-70 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel
cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in
the right front passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates.
Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric,
could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags,
for additional important information.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and door locks.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher,
and try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
additional information.
Q (Lock): Press to lock
the doors and arm the
theft-deterrent system.
See Theft-Deterrent
additional information.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press to start the engine
from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
information.
L (Panic Alarm): Press and release to locate the
vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds
three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm
turns off when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or L is
pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the
panic alarm to work.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the exterior lamps may flash and/or the horn may sound
to indicate locking has occurred. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See DIC Vehicle
& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold to open and
close the liftgate. The taillamps flash and a chime sounds
to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘2’’.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1
will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled ‘‘1’’,
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat and
on page 3-60.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door and
disarm the theft-deterrent system. Press K again
within five seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.
If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lamps may
flash. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY”
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY
IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC.
See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY”
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch, located above the
metal base.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
additional information.
Remote Vehicle Start
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start
the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts up
the vehicle’s automatic climate control system. When the
remote start system is active, the climate control system
will heat and cool the inside of the vehicle according to
the previous settings of the system before turning the
vehicle off. The rear window defogger will be turned on
by the climate control system when it is cold outside.
If the vehicle has heated seats, they will also turn on.
Normal operation of the climate control system will return
after the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Dual Climate
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote
start button until the turn signal lights flash or if the
vehicle’s lights are not visible, press and hold the
remote start button for at least four seconds. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote start
button again after the vehicle has started will turn off
the vehicle.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
If the vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To manually shut off a remote start:
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started
with the ignition key before you can use the remote
start feature again.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there
is an emission control system malfunction.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure
is too low.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that
may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press and
release the transmitter lock button and then press and
hold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter again
before the first 10 minutes of engine running time has
expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote start
buttons are pressed again after five minutes of the engine
run time, 10 minutes are added and you now have
15 minutes of engine running. The added ten minutes
are considered a second remote vehicle start.
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
information when using remote start in a closed garage.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because the vehicle has the theft-deterrent system, the
doors must be unlocked from the outside with the
key or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to avoid
setting off the alarm. If the windows are down and
the doors are locked, do not reach in to manually
unlock the vehicle because you will set off the alarm.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{ CAUTION:
From the inside, use the manual lock levers located on
the door panels near the windows.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
Central Door Unlocking System
The vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.
When unlocking the driver door, the other doors can be
unlocked by holding the key in the turned position for a
few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in the
lock cylinder.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature can be turned off using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors will
lock immediately when you press the power door lock
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry
for more information.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the front
doors.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
The vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The front
doors will remain unlocked from inside the vehicle.
The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle
and move the shift lever back into P (Park).
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of the
doors.
When the power door lock switch or the lock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, when the key is not in the ignition and the
driver door is opened, a chime will sound three times
indicating that delayed locking is active.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors
are locked, have that person use the manual lever
or power door lock switch for the rear doors. When
the door is closed again, it will not lock automatically.
Use the manual lever or the power door lock switch
to lock the door.
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
The power door locks can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
on programming, see DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-60.
Press the door lock switch or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter again to override this feature. The doors
will lock immediately.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened
from the outside with the door unlocked. To return
the door to normal operation, turn the slot to the
vertical position.
Rear Door Security Locks
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
Lockout Protection
If the power door lock switch is pressed when the key
is in the ignition and a door is open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver door will unlock. If the doors are
closed, they can be locked by using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. Be sure to remove the key from
the ignition when locking your vehicle.
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock
button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the power
lock switch a second time.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open and close the liftgate, press and hold
the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts moving.
Press the RKE button a second time to reverse that
operation. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Power Liftgate
Power Liftgate Operation
The vehicle has a power liftgate. The vehicle must
be in P (Park) to power open or close the liftgate.
The liftgate must be completely closed to power
open or completely opened to power close.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at the
beginning of each power operation cycle.
{ CAUTION:
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no
one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and
closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you
could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always
check to make sure the area above and behind the
liftgate is clear before opening it.
The liftgate can also be power closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the
button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse
that operation. The power liftgate may be temporarily
disabled under extreme temperatures or low battery
condition. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated
manually.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the transmission is shifted out of P (Park) while the
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If the transmission is shifted
out of P (Park) and accelerate before the power liftgate
latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the fully
closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
the liftgate may be power opened or closed normally.
If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the
same power cycle, the power function will deactivate,
and the liftgate will switch to manual operation. The
REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is
open. After removing the obstructions, manually open the
liftgate to the fully open position or close the liftgate to the
fully closed and latched position. The liftgate will now
resume normal power operation.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will hold open temporarily,
then slowly close. See your dealer for service before
using the liftgate.
Obstacle Detection Features
The vehicle has an obstacle detection sensor located
on the rear edge of the rear quarter panel windows.
If an object is caught between the liftgate and the
window and presses against this sensor, the liftgate
will reverse direction and open fully. The liftgate
will remain open until it is activated again or closed
manually.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Liftgate Operation
CAUTION: (Continued)
With the doors unlocked, the power liftgate can always
be manually opened and closed.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the
pull cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate
latch will power cinch to closed position. Do not force
the liftgate during a power cycle.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
Always close the liftgate before driving.
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest near each
window.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Press the switch to the first position to lower the
window to the desired level. Pull the switch up to raise
the window.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program each window:
Express-Down Window
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
This feature is on all windows. Press the switch to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-down feature. To stop the window as it is
lowering, press down or pull up briefly on the switch
again.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on all windows. Pull the switch up to
the second position and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is
raising, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
4. Continue pulling the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, each power window will
need to be reprogrammed for the express-up feature
to work. Before reprogramming, replace or recharge
the vehicle’s battery.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is
removed.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver door armrest near the
window switches.
{ CAUTION:
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows
still can be raised or lowered using the driver window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Pull the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
The driver sunshade may also have buttons for a
built-in garage door opener. See Universal Home
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. The light will
automatically come on. The light will go out when the
cover is closed.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or a
RKE transmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps
will flash for up to 30 seconds.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock
the doors with a key, use the manual door lock or if
the liftgate is ajar. It activates only if you use the RKE
transmitter or the power door lock.
Theft-Deterrent System
To avoid activating the alarm by accident:
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
• The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if
you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE
transmitter. Pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter disarms the theft-deterrent system.
Unlocking a door any other way while the system
is armed will activate the alarm when a door or
the liftgate is opened.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security
light will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm
by using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter,
or by starting the vehicle with a valid key.
To arm the system:
1. Lock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or the power door lock switch.
2. Close all the doors. The security light will illuminate.
It should go off within approximately 30 seconds.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the RKE transmitter and close the door. Wait
approximately 30 seconds until the security
light goes off.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the exterior lamps will flash.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s
door with your key, using the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-99. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key
is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
eight additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new additional key:
New Vehicle Break-In
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines for the first
500 miles (805 km):
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within five seconds of the original key
being turned to LOCK/OFF.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
If these procedures are not followed, the engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings
are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings
can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this break-in guideline every time you get
new linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
of your vehicle and more information.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which you
can insert or remove the key. This position locks
the ignition, and transmission.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off
the engine.
To shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal must be applied.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can
be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Power to the audio system will work up to 10 minutes or
until the driver door is opened. Power to the windows
or sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until any door
is opened. For an additional 10 minutes of operation,
close all the doors and turn the key to ON/RUN and
then back to LOCK/OFF.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each
try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If the vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but
can move closer for better pedal reach.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the
key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise control.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the instrument panel.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
Move the switch rearward to move the pedals closer
to your body. Move the switch forward to move the
pedals away from your body.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist
which will prevent engine coolant heater operation
at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
For the 3.6L V6 engines, the cord is located in
the engine compartment on the passenger side
of the vehicle in front of the fuse block. For the
4.6L V8 engine, the cord is on the front center
of the vehicle above the radiator.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice
on this.
You must remove the plastic cap to access
the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must
fully apply the brakes first and then press the
shift lever button before you can shift from
P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. You can also
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use R (Reverse)
to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice,
or sand without damaging the transmission. See If
page 4-29 for additional information.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
The automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control
(DSC) feature that allows you to change gears similar to
a manual transmission. To use the DSC feature:
1. Slide the shift lever over from D (Drive) to the right
into the DSC area.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
When the transmission is
in DSC mode the sport
symbol in the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
will come on.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down. The transmission will
shift down to a lower gear and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When
you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still shift
automatically. While driving in sport mode, the
transmission may remain in a gear longer than it
would in the normal driving mode based on braking,
throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the vehicle. Always upshift
when necessary while using DSC.
2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift lever
forward to upshift or rearward to downshift.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC will show the
requested gear range
when moving the shift
lever forward or rearward.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will not
automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine
RPM is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that
the transmission has not shifted gears.
While in the DSC mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to
a stop and while quickly applying the accelerator
to increase speed. This will allow for more power
during take-off.
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have
firmer shifting and increased performance. You can use
this for sport driving or when climbing or descending
hills, to stay in gear longer, or to down shift for
more power or engine braking.
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction
on slippery surfaces.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Grade Braking
Tow/Haul Mode
Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill
grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine
and the transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces
wear on the brakes system and increases control of the
vehicle. The system constantly monitors vehicle speed,
acceleration, throttle position, and whether the brake
pedal is being pressed, and determines when to keep the
current vehicle speed or to slow down. The system will
then automatically command downshifts that reduce
vehicle speed, until the brake pedal is no longer being
pressed. This indicates the desired vehicle speed has
been reached.
The tow/haul mode and grade braking shift modes can
be activated by pressing the button on the instrument
panel console. While in the DSC mode, grade braking
is deactivated, allowing the driver to select a gear.
The vehicle may be equipped with a Tow/Haul mode.
The button is located on instrument panel under
the climate controls. You should use this feature
to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load.
When Tow/Haul is
activated the Tow/Haul
symbol will illuminate on
the instrument panel
cluster. See Tow/Haul
Trailer on page 4-39
for more information.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal
is located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push the parking brake pedal down.
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster should come on.
If it does not, you need to have the vehicle serviced.
more information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use this procedure to shift into P (Park):
Shifting Into Park
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-39.
3. Continue to hold the brake pedal down, and set the
more information.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it
with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the key
in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the
driver seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)”
listed previously.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pushing the button on the shift
lever. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked into P (Park).
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal is applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
that can burn.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass
Mirrors
Compass Operation
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Press O to turn the compass on or off.
The vehicle may have an inside rearview mirror with
automatic dimming and OnStar® controls; or it may have
more information.
Turn the ignition and compass feature on. After a few
seconds, the mirror displays the current compass
direction.
Compass Calibration
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Interference can be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the
letter C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need to be reset or calibrated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle
is started.
Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in circles at
5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Variance
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone
eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance
needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance:
Outside Power Mirrors
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver’s or passenger
side mirror. The LED indicator turns on to show that
this mirror is selected.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Press (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
The LED indicator will turn off.
The preferred position can be stored in memory if the
vehicle has the memory option. See Memory Seat
2. Press and hold O until a zone number displays.
3. Once the zone number displays, press O
repeatedly until the correct zone number if reached.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return to its original position.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
The driver’s outside mirror may have an automatic
dimming feature that helps reduce glare from other
vehicle headlamps. This feature is controlled by the on
and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview
mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
on page 2-38.
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Park Tilt Mirrors
If the vehicle has memory seat and mirrors, the driver’s
or passenger mirror can tilt to a pre-selected position
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). Shift the
vehicle out of R (Reverse) and after a short delay, both
mirrors return to their original position. Use this feature
to view the curb when parallel parking.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
Select either mirror, or both mirrors through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to activate this feature.
more information.
Outside Heated Mirrors
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
information.
Use the mirror controls to make further adjustments
page 2-39 for more information.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
For vehicles with the URPA system, it operates at
speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h), and assists the driver
with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse).
The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the
distance to an object up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the
vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.
The display is located
above the liftgate glass
and can be seen by
looking over your right
shoulder.
{ CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system
does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper, underneath
the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from
the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
Description
amber light
English
5 ft
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red
light on the rear display will flash.
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
40 in
20 in
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level.
Objects must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from the
rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
five seconds
1 ft
0.3 m
The system can be disabled using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for a short time when the
vehicle is closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:
• The driver disables the system.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate. Once
the attached object is removed, URPA will return to
normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked
to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple
voice commands to browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that
the OnStar equipment is active.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is KOBGTV06A.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTV06A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. You only need the original
remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming.
It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease
termination of the vehicle, the programmed buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
To program up to three devices:
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or security
device you are programming.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device, or home
automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing a different
function button in Step 3 than what you used for the
garage door opener.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After you press this button, you will have 30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
If these instructions do not work, you probably
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of
your garage door opener motor. If you see a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be used
when programming the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches on the motor head and
hand held transmitter are different, or if the dip switch
settings are different, use the dip switch settings on
the motor head unit to program your Universal Home
Remote. The motor head dip switch settings can also
be used when you do not have the original hand held
transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.
Be sure to enter the switch settings that you wrote
down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into
the Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for each
switch setting as follows:
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to
control the garage door until the garage door moves.
The indicator light above the selected button should
slowly blink. You may need to hold the button from
five to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device, or home
automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing a different
button in Step 6 than what you used for the garage door
opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage
Storage Areas
The vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas, and
accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the console.
Glove Box
Lift the glovebox handle up to open it. Use the key to
lock and unlock the glovebox.
Luggage Carrier
Cupholders
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has cupholders located between the
front seats. Slide the cover back to expose them.
There are also cupholders in the armrest of the
second row seat. Press the panel on the front of the
armrest to expose the cupholders. On the outboard
sides of the third row there may also be cupholders.
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is
longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like
paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being driven. This can
cause a driver to lose control. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Items
may be carried inside. Never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of
the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Storage
A storage area is located above the glove box. Press
the trim panel button located to the left of the storage
panel door, to automatically open upward.
For vehicles with a storage area, located below the
climate controls, press on the storage door to open it.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover from
the passenger’s side to the driver’s side and slide the
ends into the slots to secure it. When it is not in use,
take the ends out of the slots and allow the cover to
roll back up.
Cargo Management System
For vehicles with a cargo management system, it
provides extra storage space for the rear of the vehicle.
The cargo management system has three
compartments. The one closest to the front of the
vehicle opens from behind the second row. The center
compartment has a divider. The compartment closest
to the rear of the vehicle has a removable storage bin.
If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has
side rails attached to the roof. You can get sliding
crossrails through your dealer to use for tying things
down. These let you load some things on top of
your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or
longer than the luggage carrier.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have an Ultra View® sunroof over
the first two rows of seats. The ignition must be turned
to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be active to operate it.
Sunroof
Sunroof (Ultra View)
The sunroof/sunshade
switches are located in
the headliner between the
driver and front passenger.
{ CAUTION:
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse injuries.
They can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected
from it, and be seriously injured or killed. This is true
for any vehicle occupant, in any motor vehicle. In a
rollover or other crash, the Ultra View® roof can be
damaged or destroyed. People who are unbelted
would be at risk of being ejected from the vehicle.
Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your
passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
One switch operates the sunroof and the other switch
operates the sunshade.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the
sunroof. When the switch is pressed to the first stop the
sunroof will open to a desired position. Press the switch
to the second stop to express open the sunroof to a
preset comfort position. Press the second stop again to
fully express open the sunroof. Press the front of the
switch to close the sunroof. The first stop will close the
sunroof at a desired position at normal speed, and the
second stop will express close the roof.
Resynchronization
To resynchronize the sunroof and sunshade, do the
following.
1. With the engine running, press and hold both
the sunroof switch in the open position and
the sunshade switch in the closed position
for six seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Press the back of the sunshade switch to open the
sunshade. Press the front of the switch to the first stop
to close the sunshade to a desired position at a normal
speed. Press the switch forward to the second stop to
express close the sunshade.
3. When the sunroof reaches the fully closed position,
the sunshade will close.
4. After the sunroof and sunshade have fully closed,
continue to hold the sunroof switch in the closed
position for an additional three or four seconds
to complete the resynchronization process.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse. To close the
sunroof once it has re-opened, remove the obstruction
and press the front of the sunroof switch.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
(If Equipped).
page 2-32.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Steering Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
For vehicles with a heated steering wheel, the button for
this feature is located on the steering wheel.
( : Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off.
A light on the button displays when the feature is
turned on.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start
heating.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
P : Exterior Lamp Control
2 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
# : Fog Lamps
Flash-To-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
3
If the turn signal is left on for about ⁄4 mile (1.2 km),
a warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL
ON message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under
information.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.
Pull the lever back and then release it to change from
high to low beam.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
If the vehicle is turned off while the high beams are on,
they will come on the next time the vehicle is started.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
The highbeam light on the
instrument panel cluster,
comes on while the
high-beam headlamps
are on.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned-out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-99 for more information.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When this is done the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as
the lever is held there. Release the lever to turn
them off.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
Move the lever to one of the following positions:
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push
the lever forward.
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. Hold the lever in this position for continuous
wiping cycles.
9 (Off): Turns off the wipers.
& (Delay): For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the delay
adjustment band to set the length of the delay.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the length
of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer the band is moved toward mist, the
longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must
be in delay for this feature to work.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
6 (Low Speed): For slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): For rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
information.
The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.
K (Washer Fluid): Press to wash the windshield.
Washer fluid will squirt onto the windshield and the wipers
will run for a few cycles to clear the windshield. For more
wash cycles, press and hold the button.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If they do become
damaged, install new blades. For more information, see
If the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the WASHER FLUID
LOW ADD FLUID message appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
If the headlamps are on when the windshield is washed,
the headlamp washer will turn on, if your vehicle has
them. Both the windshield and the headlamps will be
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z (Rear Wiper): Press this side of the button to turn
the rear wiper on.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Y (Washer Fluid): Press to wash and wipe the
window.
{ CAUTION:
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash the windshield but not the rear windows,
check the fluid level.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
5 (Delay): Press this side of the button to turn on
delayed wiping.
The switch for the rear
washer/wiper is located in
the overhead console.
To turn either the delay or rear wiper setting off, press
the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off
position. Pressing the button all the way down on either
side will activate a wiper setting.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Washer
Cruise Control
For vehicles with headlamp washers, they are located to
the inside of the headlamps.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Press L located at the end of the windshield wiper
lever, to wash the headlamps and windshield. After the
first wash, the headlamps will be washed after the
fifth press of the windshield washer button.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins to
limit wheel spin while using cruise control, the cruise
safely use it again, the cruise control can be turned
back on.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the washer
fluid is low, the headlamp washers will not work.
information.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise Control
Cruise Control w/Heated
Steering Wheel
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
T (On/Off): Press to turn the system on and off.
The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise
control is on.
1. Press T .
2. Get up to the desired speed.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make
the vehicle slow down.
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the brakes are applied while the cruise control is at a
set speed, the cruise control disengages. But it does
not need to be reset.
To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
and then release the button.
Once the vehicle reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the speed selected previously
and stays there.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the new desired speed is reached,
and then release the button.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed that
was set earlier.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
If the brake is applied the cruise control is disengage.
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the exterior lamps on and
off automatically depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
• Press the T button on the steering wheel.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
Erasing Speed Memory
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
The cruise control set speed memory is erased,
when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for about
six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior
lamp control must be in AUTO.
• It is daylight and the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
• The exterior lamp control is in the off or AUTO
position and the headlamps are off.
The wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off,
when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or the
windshield wiper control is turned off.
• The automatic transmission is not in P (Park).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will be
on. The other exterior lamps and the instrument panel
cluster will not be on.
Headlamps on Reminder
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough
outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on
immediately. Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
it takes about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel
brightness lever is in the full bright position.
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off. Then turn on the fog lamps or
parking lamps, and the DRL will turn off. This works
regardless of gear position and whether or not the
parking brake is set.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
# (Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is used to
turn the fog lamps on and off.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on when
needed.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
Light Sensor
To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp band
on the lever up to the dot and release it. The band
will return to its original position.
The light sensor for the
DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on
top of the instrument panel.
If the sensor is covered,
it will prevent it from
sensing light, and the
exterior lamps may
If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog
lamps will turn off. The fog lamps will come back
on when the high-beam headlamps are off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
come on whenever the
ignition is on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Entry Lighting
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking lamps
or headlamps have been left on. This protects against
draining the battery. The battery saver does not
work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF.
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control, when a door is opened or if the transmitter
unlock button is pressed. If activated by the transmitter,
the lighting stays on for about 25 seconds. The entry
lighting system uses the light sensor on the instrument
panel; so it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They dim then turn off
if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. They
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, turn
the lamps back on with the exterior lamp control.
Instrument Panel Brightness
immediately turn off if the power locks are used.
Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the
interior lights.
Parade Dimming
This feature does not let the instrument panel backlight
dim during daylight hours while the key is in the
ignition and the headlamps are on. Parade dimming
automatically works with the light sensor, located on top
of the dashboard. If it is dark enough outside and the
parking lamps are on, the backlight on the instrument
panel can be adjusted by turning the instrument
panel brightness knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lighting. See Instrument Panel
To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob completely
clockwise as far as it will go. The dome lamps stay
on until they are turned off.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,
rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and
loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
The vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console on the instrument panel and one in the rear
compartment. There may be one or two outlets in
the rear of the center console.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
There is a small cap that must be removed to access
the accessory power outlet. When not using the
outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray
Analog Clock
For vehicles with an ashtray, it is located under the
climate control system on the instrument panel.
Press the door to release the ashtray.
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel
above the radio. The clock is not connected with
any other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust
the clock:
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the instrument
panel by holding the edges and pulling straight out.
To reinstall, push the tray back into place.
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the
clock face.
There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before reaching the desired time.
Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time by
one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the
rear seat passengers.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will
pop back out.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
Climate Controls
The system automatically controls the fan speed, air
delivery, and air conditioning in order to heat or cool the
vehicle to the desired temperature.
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the
vehicle can be controlled with this system.
To place the system in automatic mode do the following:
AUTO (Automatic Mode):
1. Turn the fan and mode controls to the AUTO
position. This also sets the recirculation mode
to automatic operation on the display.
2. Press the up or down arrows to adjust the
temperature to a comfortable setting between
70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
3. Allow the system time to stabilize. This might take
several minutes in very hot or cold weather. Then
adjust the temperature, as needed for best comfort.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. In cold weather, the system starts at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle
until warmer air is available. The automatic system
starts out blowing air at the floor, but changes modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the
chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed to warm the interior depends on the outside
temperature and the amount of time that has passed
since the vehicle was last driven.
A. Fan Control
B. Display
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
D. Temperature Control
E. Air Conditioning
F. Power
G. Air Inlet Control
H. PASS (Passenger)
Climate Control
I. Rear Window
Defogger
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air Delivery Mode Control:
«ª(Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press the up
or down buttons closest to the driver to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
AUTO: Turns on the automatic delivery mode
«ª(Passenger’s Temperature Controls): Press the
up or down buttons closest to the passenger to
increase or decrease the temperature for the front
passenger. If the passenger climate control system is
off, pressing either of these buttons turns it on.
operation.
F (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets. The temperature of the air
to the floor will be warmer than the air to the upper
outlets.
Manual Operation
O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on
or off. While off, adjusting any button or control,
except recirculation and rear window defog turns the
system back on. The air inlets default to outside
air when the climate control system is turned off.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the outboard outlets, side window
outlets, and defroster outlet.
W (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor
outlets, with some air going to the outboard outlets and
side window outlets. When selected, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
If recirculation mode is selected while using the
defog mode, the system recirculates air for about
10 minutes and then returns to outside air mode.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan
speed remains at this speed until it is turned to AUTO
or adjusted to a different level. In the automatic position,
the blower might go to a lower speed during an
OnStar® session to limit the background noise.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The climate control display indicates one of the
following three modes:
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield
with some air going to the side window outlets. When
selected, the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing.
9 (Auto Air Inlet): This mode lets the automatic
climate control system choose the best air inlet position
for cooling or warming the vehicle. To have full
automatic climate control, the fan and mode controls
must be set to the AUTO position. On hot days,
the recirculation mode may be selected automatically.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press to
? (Recirculation): This mode recirculates and helps
to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
turn the passenger climate control system on or off.
Then press the passenger « or ª buttons to adjust
the temperature. Pressing PASS again automatically
sets the passengers temperature to the drivers setting.
Turning off the passenger temperature display does
not turn off the passenger climate control system.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog,
or defrosting modes. Using recirculation for long periods
of time can cause the air inside the vehicle to become
too dry or stuffy. To prevent this from happening, after the
air in the vehicle has cooled, select auto air inlet or
outside air.
Air Inlet Modes
There are three options for bringing air into the climate
control system. They are controlled by pressing the
outside air button on the climate control panel.
F (Outside Air): Air is pulled from outside the
vehicle. Outside air is always selected in defrost mode
to prevent fogging.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an interior
Air Conditioning
temperature sensor
located below the climate
control system next to
the steering wheel.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning on or off, and override the automatic
system. When selecting the AUTO fan or AUTO mode,
the air conditioning comes on automatically, as
necessary.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so water might drip underneath the vehicle while
idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Sensors
An ambient sensor is located behind the grille in front
of the vehicle.
There is a solar sensor
located on top of the
instrument panel, near the
windshield.
These sensors help the climate control system
automatically control the temperature setting.
The system can supply cooler air to the side of the
vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also
be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Do not cover any of the sensors or the climate control
system might not work properly.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheels
to open or close the outlets.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. The rear window defogger stays on
for about 20 minutes, before turning off. At higher
vehicle speeds, the rear defogger can stay on
continuously. Each additional press runs the defogger
for about 10 minutes.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
When the rear window defogger is pressed, the heated
outside mirrors come on. They help to clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror. See Outside Heated
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter might need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-28.
• Set the climate control system to AUTO fan and
mode and then adjust the temperature setting
up or down a few degrees for best comfort.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the rear control,
turn the front control to
AUX, then use the
rear control to increase
and decrease the airflow.
Rear Air Conditioning System
For vehicles with the rear air conditioning system, it has
two fan speed selectors. One fan speed selector is
located in the front overhead console and the other is
located in the headliner above the second row seats.
The rear air conditioning system is designed to provide
cooled air only.
To operate the rear system
using the front control,
turn the knob to the
Rear Control
fan position desired.
Front Control
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter helps remove dust
and pollen from the air entering the vehicle. Like the
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs to be changed
periodically. For how often to change the passenger
page 6-4.
1. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
information. Locate the passenger compartment air
filter access panel door.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
information on location.
2. Push the two tabs on the access panel door
towards the windshield.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. While pressing forward, lift the access panel out
of the clipped position and pull towards the front
of the vehicle. This releases the clips and allows
the panel door to be removed.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
4. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.
Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward
the passenger compartment.
for the correct part number for the filter.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). See
“SPEEDOMETER” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-46 for more information.
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the
safety belt, unless the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works together
with the driver information center. You can set a
Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Fuel” under
information.
The driver safety belt light
comes on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the engine speed from reaching
an unsafe level. If the level is too high, the throttle closes
or limits the fuel supply until the engine speed returns
to a safe level. Throttle operation and fuel supply returns
to normal when engine speed is lowered.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, comes on and stays on for
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners,
the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on
several seconds and then flashes for several more.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
United States
Canada
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{ CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
{ CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front
passenger’s seat, it means that the passenger
sensing system has not turned off the passenger’s
frontal airbag. A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. Do not
use a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel
cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in
the right front passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
The traction control system
warning light comes on
briefly while starting
the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on,
the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
This light comes on when your traction control system is
limiting wheel spin. You may feel or hear the system
working, but this is normal.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, the vehicle needs service. See
more information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
It indicates when the engine has warmed up and if the
cooling system is operating properly. If the gage
pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine coolant
is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning
for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to
The vehicle’s engine could be damaged, and it might
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
with the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
for more information.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it working.
This light also comes on when one or more of the tires
is significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can accompany the light. See DIC
information.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate the tire to the proper pressure.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light flashes for approximately 60 seconds
and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition
for more information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions occurs,
change the fuel brand used. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Light
For vehicles with an oil
pressure light, if there is a
problem with the oil,
the light may stay on after
the engine is started, or
comes on while driving.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
This light indicates that oil is not going through the engine
quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could be
low on oil or could have some other oil problem. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently
been replaced or if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate
critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine
driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
The oil light could also come on in the following
situations:
• The light comes on briefly when the ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly.
If it does not come on with the ignition on, there
may be a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, a
chime sounds and the light may blink on and off.
This is normal.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
{ CAUTION:
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
page 2-19.
information.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
Fuel Gage
Highbeam On Light
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
It works only when
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
the engine is on.
for more information.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the status
of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used
to display warning/status messages. All messages will
appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster, below the tachometer and
speedometer. The DIC buttons are located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
All of the following situations are normal and do
not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status messages.
The bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer
on the left side, the outside air temperature on the
right side, and the shift position indicator in the center.
For more information on the shift position indicator,
When the sport mode is active, an S will appear next to
the shift position indicator on the center of the DIC
display. When the manual mode is active, an M will
appear on the DIC display. When the normal mode
is active, only the shift position indicator will appear.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the DIC will change to show the selected gear.
See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic
information.
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
customization features.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel.
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the range drops below about 30 miles (48 km)
remaining, the display will show FUEL RANGE LOW.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items can
be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
for more information.
TRIP A or TRIP B
These displays show the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to
zero separately by pressing and holding the set/reset
button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number
of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this
display was reset. To reset this display, press the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
FUEL RANGE
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based on
the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
This display shows the current fuel economy in either
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and will change
frequently as driving conditions change. Unlike average
economy, this display cannot be reset.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL USED
AVERAGE SPEED
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.
To reset this display, press the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle
in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset
of this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
TIMER ON/OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button
until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
This display shows the current battery voltage.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and
display the end timing value.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the charging system light will illuminate and/or the
DIC will display a message. See Charging System Light
page 3-19 for more information.
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button
after the timer has been stopped. The display will
return to zero.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNITS
Vehicle Information Display Menu Items
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press
the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or
METRIC units.
T (Vehicle Information): The following display
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
OIL LIFE REMAINING
PARKING ASSIST
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life
remains.
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this display allows the system to
be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the
set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you
choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose
OFF, the system will be turned off. The URPA system
automatically turns back on after each vehicle start.
When the URPA system is turned off and the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC will display the
PARKING ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that
the system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You should
change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to
the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine Oil
when the system is reset.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC shows the tire
pressure for the front tires. Press the vehicle information
button again to view the pressure for the rear tires.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
more information.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
SPEEDOMETER
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to the vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to the vehicle:
This display shows a digital speedometer in the DIC.
The speed will be displayed in either miles per hour
(mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC shows the digital
speedometer. To change the units from English to
metric, see “UNITS” earlier in this section.
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the set/reset button.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button
until BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the screen
seriously and remember that clearing the message only
makes the message disappear, not the problem.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
When this message displays, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system,
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires
also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
ENGINE HOT – A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on.
You can continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays whenever the cruise control is
information.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single
chime sounds when this message is displayed.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays when the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from damage.
There could be several malfunctions that might cause
this message. Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
HOOD OPEN
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A multiple chime sounds when this message is
information.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
PARKING ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started,
this message displays to remind the driver that
the URPA system has been turned off. Press the
set/reset button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system
back on, see “PARKING ASSIST” under DIC Operation
information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light may also
appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when the liftgate is not closed
completely. Make sure that the liftgate is closed
completely.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more information.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
page 3-46 for more information.
This message displays when the air delivery mode
door or the electronic sensors that control the air
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system serviced by your
dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-4.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with
this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your dealer/retailer. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in
the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and the
antilock brake system warning light may also display
on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake System
If this happens, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message displays
or appears again when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soon
information.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
This message displays if a problem is detected with the
speed variable assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® system.
If this message comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off
then back on. If this message still stays on or comes
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle
needs service. Have the StabiliTrak® system
inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-39. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-60 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the magnetic ride
control or automatic leveling control system is not
operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message
displays, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.
more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the system which means
that the system is disabled and it is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you
may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
more information.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you should
turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in
sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your
vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving
in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel
spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when your vehicle speed
is limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
This message may display and the Traction Control
System and StabiliTrak® Warning Light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the
page 4-6 for more information.
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
STABILITRAK OFF
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak®,
or when the stability control has been automatically
disabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits
of the stability enhancement system, you should
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears with
this message.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
page 4-6 for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays if the theft-deterrent system has
detected a break-in attempt while you were away
page 2-19 for more information.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control System
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURN SIGNAL ON
DIC Vehicle Customization
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime
sounds when this message is displayed.
The vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
All of the customization options may not be available on
the vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed
on the DIC.
This symbol appears with
this message.
The customization features were set to the default
settings when the vehicle left the factory, but they may
have been changed from their default state since
that time.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
ITALIAN: All messages will appear in Italian.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear
back to English.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY IN
ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to select English as the language in
which all DIC messages will appear.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to
select which doors and when they will automatically
page 2-10 for more information.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically
lock when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
on page 2-4 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter,
and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the previous command.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power
door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this
feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature
is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
doors.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPROACH LIGHTING
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
EASY EXIT SEAT
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
information.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
is removed from the ignition.
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
for more information.
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn
the remote start feature off or on. The remote start
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears in the display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position when
the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed. If the vehicle has the adjustable
throttle and brake pedal feature, the pedals will also
automatically move. See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY”
for more information on matching transmitters to driver
ID numbers.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The ignition is no longer in ON/RUN.
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
page 4-2.
are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Enabling/Disabling the Digital
Radio Clock
For the Single CD Player
To turn the radio clock display on or off:
1. Turn the radio on.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
menus appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow label until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
Setting the Clock
Radio with a Single CD or a Six-Disc
CD Player
Vehicles equipped with a Bose® sound system,
have an analog clock as well as the digital radio clock.
At the time of new vehicle delivery, the digital radio
clock display should be disabled. If you decide to
use the digital radio clock as well as the analog
clock, you can change the setting to enable the
radio clock display.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.
The menus for clock and date settings are removed,
and ON displays as a current status indicating
that the clock display can be turned on, if desired.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio clock
using the procedure below to synchronize both clocks.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For a Six-Disc CD Player
To turn the radio clock display on or off:
1. Turn the radio on.
Setting the Time and Date
For the Single CD Player
This type of radio has a H button for setting the time
and date. To set the time and date:
2. Press the MENU button until the H label option
is displayed.
1. Turn the radio on.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the H label
2. Press the H button and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
until the clock and date settings appear.
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow label until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
5. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right SEEK arrow or the
\ FWD button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
left SEEK arrow or the s REV button.
You can also turn the a knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio faceplate, to adjust
the selected setting.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.
The menus for clock and date settings are removed,
and ON displays as a current status indicating
that the clock display can be turned on, if desired.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For a Six-Disc CD Player
Changing the Time and Date
Default Setting
This type of radio has a MENU button for setting the
time and date. To set the time and date:
For the Single CD Player
1. Turn the radio on.
To change the time and date default setting:
2. Press the MENU button until the H label option is
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour
to 24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing
displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the H label
and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year) displays.
the H button.
2. Once the clock and date settings display along with
the forward arrow, press the pushbutton located
under the forward arrow until the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right SEEK arrow or the
\ FWD button.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the H button again to apply
the selected default, or let the screen time out.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can
also turn the a (tune) knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio faceplate, to adjust
the selected setting.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Six-Disc CD Player
Radio(s)
To change the time and date default setting:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour
to 24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing
the MENU button.
2. Once the H label displays, press the pushbutton
located under that label until the time and date
settings display along with a forward arrow.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and the date
MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™.
The display shows the selection.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
a (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts radio volume to compensate for road and wind
noise as driving speed changes. That way, the
volume level should sound about the same as you
drive. To activate SCV:
to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
three seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
The radio only seeks and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press to
simultaneously display the Channel Number, Song Title,
and Artist information while in XM mode. Press to
display additional text information related to the current
FM-RDS, or MP3/WMA song, if available.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med
(medium), or High) to select the level of radio
volume compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if your vehicle has this
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button. Press the
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a station as a
favorite, perform the following steps:
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode.
To find XM channels within a desired category:
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a knob
until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM station associated with that category.
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV
button until the desired levels are obtained. If a
station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static, decrease
the treble.
3. Turn the a knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
to go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the a knob for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position. Pressing this knob for more than two seconds
also centers the fade and balance settings to the
factory default positions.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Radio Message
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT
label.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
3. Turn the a knob to display the category you want
removed.
XM Satellite Radio Service
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in
the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the
XM service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under
the Restore All label.
The radio does not let you remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The CAT button also toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.
Radio Messages for XM Only
section for further detail.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert multiple CDs:
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
1. Press and hold the ^ button for five seconds.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on
the CD. As each new track starts to play the track
number displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD
that is currently playing, press and release this button.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD
can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player and begins playing.
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): For the Radio with Six-Disc CD
player, the tracks can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in the
six-disc CD player. To use random:
a (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.
• To play the tracks from the CD you are listening to
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Randomize Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
4 (Information): Press to switch the display between
the track number, elapsed time of the track, and
the time. When the ignition is off, press to display the
time, if the clock display is enabled.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD tracks
can be played in random, rather than sequential
order. This feature is not available in playlist mode.
To use random:
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
1. To play tracks from the CD you are listening to in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label. The random icon displays.
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random
play. The random icon disappears from the display.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
displays.
Care of The CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
CD Messages
DISC ERROR: If an error message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. Connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary
input jack for use as another source for audio listening.
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the
data file format.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Using an MP3
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name,
and album can display when files are recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player.
You might need to do additional volume adjustments
from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft
enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
power it off.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the
CAT button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device displays.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T
folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded
using no file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or
CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum cannot be accessed.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the
following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the
player advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty
folder does not display.
Playlists can be changed by pressing the S c and
c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File System and Naming
Playing an MP3/WMA
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If it is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into
the player and begins playing.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files. Playlists
must have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R currently playing.
folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
Tracks cannot be changed. Songs are played
sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD to reverse
or advance through the currently playing song.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files
on the CD.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below
the Back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name displays on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album
have played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It may take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin
playing while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW
begins playing again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below
the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
have played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to
listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button. The
CD goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical
order. Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside
the radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input
Device Found” displays.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
through the headphones, while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
You can operate the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) functions
even when the main radio is off. The front audio system
will display the headphone icon when the RSA is on,
and will disappear from the display when it is off.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
If the vehicle has a navigation radio system, it could
have the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
For more information on how to use the RSE system,
see “Rear Seat Entertainment System” in the Navigation
System manual.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also be
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Depending on the audio system, the rear speakers can
continue to play even when the RSA audio is active
through the headphones.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the
front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
This feature lets rear seat passengers listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources the front
seat passengers are not listening to (except on some
radios where dual control is allowed). For example,
rear seat passengers can control a CD and listen to it
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station or channels and stay
there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
While listening to a CD, press the left seek arrow to
go back to the start of the current track (if more than
ten seconds have played) or press the right seek arrow
to hear the next track on the CD.. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left headphones and the right knob controls
the right headphones.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold the seek arrows to perform a cursor left
or right on the menu.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The vehicle has audio steering wheel controls, they
could differ depending on the vehicle’s options.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the CD or
DVD audio.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.
Left-Side Audio Steering
Wheel Controls With
Out Heated Steering
Wheel Shown, Controls
With Heated Steering
Wheel Similar
Right-Side Audio
Steering Wheel Controls
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. See the following descriptions of the controls that
can adjusted.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio
(AM, FM), XM and CD.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y / c z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the
Radio Reception
previous or the next radio station stored as a favorite.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to
the previous or to the next track.
Press c z to end an OnStar Hands-Free Call.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on the radio.
b g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release to
silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio of the
wireless and wired headphones, if the vehicle has these
features, does not mute. Press and release this button
again, to turn the sound on.
If the vehicle has the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
If the vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar®
system. If your vehicle also has the navigation system,
press and hold this button for longer than one second to
initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio
reception or damage the rear side window antenna.
Repairs would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows with
sharp objects.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to the antenna
due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered
by the warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Rear Side Window Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear
side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear
side windows are not scratched and that the lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces
are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy
to ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the
pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops,
you will still have some power brake assist. But you will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up,
it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be
harder to push.
If there is a problem with
the ABS, this warning light
will stay on. See Antilock
page 3-37.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than even
the very best braking.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Brake Assist
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of
the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel the
brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is normal.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
be turned off if needed by pressing and holding the
TCS/StabiliTrak button until the TCS/StabiliTrak light
comes on the instrument panel and STABILITRAK OFF
appears in the DIC. For information on turning TCS off
and on, see Traction Control System (TCS) following.
The vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. Cruise
control may be reengaged when road conditions allow.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction.
Traction Control System (TCS)
When the stability control system activates, the Traction
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will flash on the
instrument panel. This also occurs when traction control
is activated. A noise may be heard or vibration may be
felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer
the vehicle in the intended direction.
The vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel
spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions.
On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system operates if it
senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)
vehicle, the system will operate if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a
SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
The TCS warning light will also flash to indicate that the
traction control system is active.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the vehicle
is started. To assist with directional control of the vehicle,
the system should always be left on. StabiliTrak can
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This warning light comes
on if there is a problem
with the traction control
system.
It may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the
vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It
using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions.
To turn the system off,
press the TCS/StabiliTrak®
button located on the
console under the climate
controls.
page 3-37. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle
is started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, the system should always be left on.
But, TCS can be turned off if needed.
Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button and the
traction control system will turn off and the traction
control system warning light will come on. Press
the button again to turn the system back on.
For information on turning StabiliTrak off and on,
see StabiliTrak System previously.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle’s driveline
could be damaged.
When TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles, the system
may still make noise. This is normal and necessary
with the AWD hardware on the vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect the vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnetic Ride Control™
Steering
Vehicles with this feature automatically adjust the ride of
the vehicle based on driving conditions. Magnetic Ride
Control monitors the suspension system to determine the
proper system response. If the controller detects a
problem within the system, the DIC will display a
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See DIC
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction
to move the vehicle.
If you need to reduce speed, do it before you enter the
curve, while the front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
at all times. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no
separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front
axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with all-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without all-wheel drive should not
be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second
skid if it occurs.
Many of the vehicle design features that help make the
vehicle more responsive on paved roads during poor
weather conditions also help make it better suited for
off-road use than conventional passenger vehicles.
The vehicle does not have features usually thought to
be necessary for extended or severe off-road use such
as special underbody shielding and transfer case low
gear range.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
Before You Go Off-Roading
• Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
• Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire is fully
inflated.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road
and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very
time you need special alertness and driving skills, your
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected
by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
• Be sure to read all the information about
all-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
• Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are
not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can be
slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
• Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
• Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer
and more enjoyable.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
You will find other important information under Loading
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves, and lanterns.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the
environment:
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote Areas
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if
there are any blocked or closed roads.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs,
flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife. This
includes wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over soft
ground.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use
it properly.
• Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
• More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected
obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or
engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body to
respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
{ CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you are driving
on or off the road, you and your passengers
should wear safety belts.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher speeds:
• You approach things faster and have less time
to react.
• There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some things to consider:
Scanning the Terrain
• Is the path ahead clear?
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and
longer braking distances can occur.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep
a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or
even the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road
signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good
judgment about what is safe and what is not.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the
top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you might not see this because
the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or
shrubs.
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across
a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what the vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot
be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
{ CAUTION:
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard
to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be
a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
• Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can
roll backward very quickly and could go out
of control.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in R (Reverse).
• Never try to turn around if about to stall when going
up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle,
it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. If you
• If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if
it rolled downhill.
• While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can
tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back down the hill with
the wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
Driving Downhill
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes
will have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and
apply the parking brake.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear
so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not
have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the
vehicle under control at all times.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
{ CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause
loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel,
muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the
tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something that will trip it — a
rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a
hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline,
consider the following:
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more.
{ CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to
the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
Stalling on an Incline
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes. On
loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,
the tires will tend to sink into the sand. This affects
steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
{ CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that
you will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle
does get moving, poor steering and difficult braking
can cause it to slide out of control.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you,
and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the
door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill
side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right in
its path.
{ CAUTION:
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on
safe surfaces only.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do not
get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick, turning is
more difficult, and braking distances are longer.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get the
tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under water, you will
never be able to start the engine. When going through
water, remember that when the brakes get wet, it might
take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain and on Wet
Driving in Water
{ CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Watch for animals.
Driving at Night
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect
your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower
in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving
through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing
water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
on page 5-48.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
Hill and Mountain Roads
clean — inside and outside?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
{ CAUTION:
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
{ CAUTION:
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but
slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
When driving through deep snow, turn off the traction
control system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds.
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
about driving off-road.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
{ CAUTION:
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on the
side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to
bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set
the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
CAUTION: (Continued)
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction system
in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system
to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use
the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving
about to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-56.
There is also important loading information on
the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker).
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
United States version shown, Canada similar
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached
to either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle and
is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight,
if pulling a trailer.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and payloads. Please note the
Certification/Tire label on your truck or consult
your dealer for additional details.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the
centerline.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else —they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be
towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Service
on page 7-7.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing the vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See Off-Road
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed,
see “Dolly Towing” following for more information.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a RWD vehicle
from the rear:
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
page 2-32.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of the vehicle level as the
load changes. The system is automatic and no
adjustments are necessary.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles, can be towed using
a dolly. All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, can only be
towed on a flat-bed trailer.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could
be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following chart to determine how much the
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,
or write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Maximum
Package
Base
Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
6,853 lbs
(3 808 kg)
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa,
V92 Trailering
Package
4,250 lbs
(1 928 kg)
9,353 lbs
(4 242 kg)
Ontario L1H 8P7
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle
should not be exceeded.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that
for more information about the vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
If a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch
is being used, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce
the trailering capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the
rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can be
put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The
effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR
as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle
and trailer.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to
seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they
are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from
the engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle.
holes will also prevent dirt and water from entering
the vehicle.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
page 4-30 for more information. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR,
including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a
weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the
rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution
spring bars.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by
the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so the
rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later
in the section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the
following driving conditions:
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at
the end of the shift lever
turns on and off the
tow/haul mode.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is
recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large
or heavy load.
This indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on when the
tow/haul mode is on.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs (900 kg)
needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for
the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed,
adjusted and maintained properly. Because the vehicle
has StabiliTrak, do not try to tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system. If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 2-31.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when
the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods
of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become
very warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed
that might be affected by high ambient temperatures.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode previously.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic
transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning
the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index
for more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-29.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of
87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing, you
could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded
gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, you might
notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
for additional information.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap
is not reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-39.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-39.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is located
under the front edge of the grille near the center.
Move the release lever to the side and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-99.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
page 5-38.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-38.
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, you will see the following:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-38.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-38.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
on page 5-99.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The vehicle could have an
oil pressure light on the
instrument cluster.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
There is also an OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the light and/or message appears, check the engine
oil level right away. For more information, see “OIL
PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE” under DIC Warnings
on page 3-42. You should check the engine oil
level regularly; this is an added reminder.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
3.6L V6 Engine
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
4.6L V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine
oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not
be available. You can add substitute oil designated
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil change.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on.
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start the vehicle, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
4.6L V8 shown, 3.6L V6 similar
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through
the opening in the airbox.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
page 6-15 for the correct part number for the filter.
6. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.
{ CAUTION:
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Do not drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of the
cover.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that
it is not going across the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
3. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult,
you should have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
3.6L V6 shown, 4.6L V8 similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s) (Out of view)
B. Mechanical Engine Cooling Fan (If equipped)
(Out of view)
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine
driven fan, as well as the electric pusher fans (A)
which are located behind the vehicle’s grille.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-29.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If
coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the FULL COLD/FROID line, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before this is done.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of
the coolant surge tank. Follow the arrow from the top of
the tank down the side to the horizontal mark. If it is
not, there could be a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle
to a dealer/retailer for service.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator hose is
the largest of the hoses which comes out of the
radiator, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Watch
out for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightly above the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant
surge tank.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There are two engine hot messages that could be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If the engine is overheating, then you will find a coolant
temperature gage and a coolant warning light on the
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem.
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine coolant temperature gage is no longer in
the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the
vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle
distance from the car in front of you. If the warning
does not come back on, continue to drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
Power Steering Fluid
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see ″Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode″
later in this section.
reservoir location.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency. Should a hot engine
condition exist, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, there is a loss in power and
engine performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the
fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-51 for more information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from a sealed container only. See Recommended
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have your brake hydraulic
system checked to see
if there is a leak.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
DOT-3 brake fluid is recommended. DOT-4 brake
fluid is also compatible with the vehicle’s brake
system parts. However, if DOT-4 fluid is used, it is
recommended that the brake hydraulic system be
flushed and refilled with new DOT-4 fluid at a regular
maintenance service every two years. See Additional
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Battery
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it
is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations or the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+)
location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment
locations the terminals.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach
the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative
ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located on
the passenger side front shock tower. See Engine
always use this remote ground location, instead of
the terminal on the battery.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your
vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, there
is an additional system that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After the
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off
again when the wipers are in the out-wipe position.
The driver side blade will be straight up and down on
the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a
T-shaped position. You should be able to see a tab.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade
assembly down far enough to release it from the
J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
To replace the rear wiper blade follow the steps listed
previously.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
page 5-56.
{ CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-30.
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. The
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-68.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
page 5-73.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-56.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-56.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-30.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-65.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Inflation - Tire Pressure
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
How to Check
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
High-Speed Operation
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the
cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever
is lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
additional information.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver
when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,
excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-51.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure
for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-56.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms
that the sensor identification code has been
matched to this tire and wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle
has the following tire combinations:
• P235/65R17 size tires on the front wheels and
P255/60R17 size tires on the rear wheels.
• P235/60R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P255/55R18 size tires on the rear wheels.
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front
to rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used
in its original front or rear position.
Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle is
equipped with P255/50R20 size tires on all
four wheel positions. These tires should be rotated
every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km).
When rotating P255/50R20 size tires, always use
the correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the
tire rotation.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-30.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS
page 5-50, for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands, or types may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand,
and type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to
drive with your vehicle’s compact spare
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as
your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
temporarily, it was developed for use on your
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle’s wheels.
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, do not
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P255/50R20 use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use chains that are the proper size
for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle.
Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment is located in the rear of the vehicle.
To access the equipment:
1. Remove the storage bin to access the jack if your
vehicle has the cargo management system.
If your vehicle has the third row seat, remove the
head rest storage tray to access the jack.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
2. Turn the wing nut (A) holding the jack (B) (and
storage tray, if applicable) counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the jack and wheel wrench (C). The
wrench is in a bag.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire (D) can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
page 5-88 for more information about the compact spare.
To remove the spare tire from the vehicle, do the
following:
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Cable
C. Retainer
D. Compact Spare Tire
5. Tilt the retainer (C) and slip it through the wheel
opening to remove the spare tire from the cable (B).
6. Turn the wrench clockwise until you feel two slips
or hear two clicks after removing the spare tire to
raise the cable back up.
for more information.
2. Open the storage compartment door of the cargo
management system that is nearest the liftgate
and remove the container.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the
vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
3. Attach the wheel wrench (A) into the hoist shaft.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch might
be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the
following to check the cable:
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
over-tighten the cable.
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it is
not visible, see
3. Loosen the cable then by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at
least two times, if the spare tire has not lowered.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 4 under Removing the Spare Tire
If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, see
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
To remove the flat tire and install the spare:
3. Find the jacking location using the V–shaped
notches located in the plastic molding.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
{ CAUTION:
2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them
yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench
off the lug nut for each turn.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the triangle on the
plastic molding as shown.
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
Notice: Using a jack to raise the vehicle without
positioning it correctly could damage your vehicle.
When raising your vehicle on a jack, be sure to
position it correctly under the frame and avoid
contact with the plastic molding.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
lift head until the jack just fits under the vehicle.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-74.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
13. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheel wrench to
the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
sequence, as shown.
16. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have
the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare
tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the
tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
page 5-85 for instructions on storing the spare tire
correctly.
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can
cause the wheel to come loose and even come
off. This could lead to a crash. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon
as you can and have the nuts tightened with a
torque wrench to the proper torque specification.
for wheel nut torque specification.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure
at Step 3.
{ CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
2. If the cable is visible,
place the wrench on
the hoist drive nut
and turn the wrench
counterclockwise
until approximately
6 inches (15 cm)
of cable is exposed.
{ CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from the under spare.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise the
jack at least 10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out
from under the vehicle.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place, this lets
you know that the secondary latch has released.
9. Reach under the vehicle and remove the wheel
wrench and jack.
7. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Tilt the retainer and slip
it through the wheel
opening when the
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
spare tire has been
completely lowered.
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
11. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up if the cable is hanging.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Flat Tire with Third Row
Passengers
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load
Floor
1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
2. Use the power third row seat button, near the
liftgate, to tilt the third row seatback forward slightly.
2. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in a horizontal position on the floor in the rear of
the vehicle.
3. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in an upright position against the third row seat.
3. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
4. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
5. Tighten the tie-down strap.
4. Tighten the tie-down strap.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
upwards, the secondary latch will not work properly
and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall
from the vehicle. If this happened when the vehicle
was being driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and damage to itself.
Be sure the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored
with the valve stem pointing down.
3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the
center hole of the spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
To store the spare tire and tools, do the following:
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare
tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing
the rear of the vehicle.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the
spare tire.
6. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn
the tire so that the valve stem is towards the rear of
the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until
you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate the tire inflation
monitor system after installing or removing the compact
The system may not work correctly when the compact
spare is installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case
you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn the tire (B). If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment cover
back on.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
Fabric/Carpet
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a
clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-93.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
your vehicle’s engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is in the passenger side rear storage
compartment or at the lower edge of the liftgate.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed or goes away.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located on
each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
Underhood Fuse Block
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the right side of the vehicle. See Engine
information on location.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
Usage
Relays
FAN 1
FAN 2
FOG LAMP
FRT WASH
Usage
Engine Cooling Fan Motors
Engine Cooling Fan Motors
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Accessory Power (Rear Wipers,
Inside Rearview Mirror)
Series/Parallel Engine Cooling Fan
ACCY
Front Washer Pump
FAN S/P
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
J Case Fuses
Usage
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
HDLP WASH Headlamp Washer Pump (Optional)
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Module
ABS MOTOR
BLWR
FAN 1
FAN 2
Front Blower Motor Assembly
Left Cooling Fan Motor
Right Cooling Fan Motor
LRPDB (Left Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Left Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
RRPDB (Right Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
RRPDB (Right Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
Spare
Spare
HI BEAM
HORN
IGN
LO BEAM -
W/O HID/HID
High-Beam Headlamps
Horn
Ignition Switch (ON)
LPDB 1
LPDB 2
RPDB 1
RPDB 2
Low-Beam Headlamps
Powertrain/Engine Control
Module (ECM)
PWR/TRN
REAR WASH Rear Washer Pump
SPARE
SPARE
STRTR
WPR
Spare
Spare
Starter Solenoid
Windshield Wiper System - On/Off
Windshield Wiper
System - Low/High
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STRTR
Spare
Starter Solenoid
WPR HI
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
ABS Ignition, Variable Effort
Steering
Rear Wiper Motor & Switch, Inside
Rearview Mirror
Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM),
Occupant Sensor Display,
Instrument Cluster
ECM 1
ECM
ECM/Transmission Control Module
ABS IGN
ECM/TCM IGN Ignition Power, Mass Airflow
Sensor (V6)
ACCY WPR
Pre O2 Sensors, Cam Phasor (V6),
canister Purge (V6), Intake Manifold
Tuning Valve (V6)
EMIS 1
AIRBAG
Cooling Fan Relays, Air
Conditioning Clutch Relay, Post O2
Sensors, Mass Airflow Sensor (V8),
Canister Purge (V8)
Even Ignition Coils, Even Fuel
Injectors
Front Fog Lamps
Front Washer Pump
Center Console Accessory Power
Outlet
Body Control Module (BCM) Power
LED Instrument Panel Dimming,
Overhead Lamps, Vanity Lamps
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL), Back-up Lamps
Left Side Front Turn Lamps, Rear
Stoplamps, Turn Lamps
Right Side Rear Stoplamps, Turn
Lamps, Key Capture Solenoid
EMIS 2
AUX OUTLET
BCM 1
EVEN COILS
BCM 2
FOG LAMP
FRT WASH
BCM 4
BCM 5
BCM 6
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
HORN
IGN SW
Horn Assembly
Ignition Switch, Immobilizer Module
LT HI BEAM Left Side High-Beam Headlamp
LT LO BEAM Left Side Low-Beam Headlamp
BCM 7/CLOCK Switch Dimming, Analog Clock
Instrument Panel Accessory Power
Outlet (Cigarette Lighter)
Instrument Panel Cluster, Climate
Control Module, Diagnostic Link
Connector
MISC IGN
ODD COILS
RDO
Air Quality Sensor
Odd Ignition Coils, Odd Fuel
Injectors
CIG
DISPLY
Radio
REAR WASH Rear Washer Pump
RT HI BEAM Right Side High-Beam Headlamp
ECM BATT
Engine Control Module (ECM)
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Left Side)
Mini Fuses
Usage
RT LO BEAM Right Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Battery Regulated Voltage Control
RVC SNSR
Sense
The left side rear fuse block is located under the rear
seat on the left side of the vehicle. The carpet must be
lifted up to access the rear fuse block.
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
TCM BATT
WPR
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Windshield Wiper Motor
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
Circuit Breaker
HDLP WASH Headlamp Washer Pump
Usage
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
PRK LAMP
REAR/FOG
RT POS
Usage
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor Motor
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
ELC
LH/POS/PRK
LAMP
Front & Rear Park Lamps
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
SPARE
SPARE
STOP
Usage
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Spare
Spare
Not Used
REAR SEAT
MDL
Rear Seat Module, Flip/Fold Motors
REAR/FOG
LAMP
Not Used
Mini Fuses
RH/POS LAMP Not Used
3RD ROW
SW/RFA
Flip Fold Seat Switches, Remote
Keyless Entry System Module
Right Side Taillamp, Right Side
Front Park Lamps, Sidemarker
Lamps
RH/PRK
LAMPS
AMP
Audio Amplifier
Rear Seat Entertainment,
Rear Seat Audio
AUX PWR
OUTLET
RSA/RSE
Rear Auxiliary Power Outlet
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
Spare
DRIVER
DR MDL
Driver Door Module (Locks, Outside
Rearview Mirror, Window Switches)
LH/PRK POS Left Side Taillamp, Left Side Front
LAMPS
Park Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps
STOP LAMPS Not Used
STR/WHL/
MRK LAMP
License Lamps
Memory Seat Module, Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) Module
Steering Wheel Controls
MSM/RPA
CNTRL
TRLR PRK
LAMPS
ONSTAR
TV/XM
Trailer Park Lamps
OnStar® Module, XM™ Radio
PRK LAMP
LH/POS RLY
Parking Lamp Relay
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Right Side)
J Case Fuses
ELC
Usage
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor
The right side rear fuse block is located under the rear
seat on the right side of the vehicle. The carpet must
be lifted up to access the rear fuse block.
SPARE
Spare
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
PWR WNDWS Power Window Motors
Misc.
FUSE PLR
J/C
Usage
Fuse Puller
Joint Connector
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
LCK
Usage
Rear Door Locks
Relays
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Usage
Spare
Spare
Spare
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
Rear Air Conditioning Blower Motor,
Climate Control Ignition, Heated
Steering Wheel
RUN
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
SPARE
UNLCK
Usage
Spare
Rear Door Locks
Mini Fuses
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Usage
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Mini Fuses
Usage
Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM),
Occupant Sensor, Rollover Sensor
AIRBAG
THEFT UGDO Garage Door Opener
Hush Panel Lamps, Overhead
Courtesy Lamp Assembly, Right
Side Front Turn Lamp
WPR ISRVM Rear Wiper Switch, Inside Rearview
BCM 3
VICS
Mirror
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent Solenoid
J Case Fuses
S/ROOF/MDL Power Sunroof Module
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate Motors
Usage
DR/LCK
Rear Door Locks
Electronic Leveling
Compressor (ELC) Exhaust
Solenoid, ELC Relay
ELC
HTD/STR/WHL Heated Steering Wheel
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
MRTD
Suspension Module
PWR/SEATS Power Seat Motors
Passenger Door Module (Locks,
Outside Mirror, Window Switches)
PDM
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate Module
REAR A/C Rear Air Conditioning System
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
Misc.
FUSE PLR
J/C
Usage
Fuse Puller
Joint Connector
RUN
SPARE
Climate Control Module
Spare
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System
3.6L V6
11.7 qt
12.5 qt
11.1 L
11.8 L
4.6L V8
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6
6.0 qt
8.0 qt
5.7 L
7.6 L
75.7 L
0.9 L
4.6L V8
Fuel Tank
20.0 gal
0.9 qt
Transfer Case Fluid
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement)
5-Speed Automatic
7.4 qt
6.7 qt
7.0 L
6.3 L
6-Speed Automatic
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
0.044 in (1.10 mm)
0.050 in (1.27 mm)
3.6L V6
4.6L V8
7
Automatic
A
Automatic
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
on page 5-5.
To purchase service information, see Service
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
recommended for the vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections
are required:
❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels and add fluid as needed.
❑ Perform any needed additional services.
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.
❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.
❑ Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
See footnote (b).
❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
See footnote (g).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
See footnote (k).
❑ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (e).
❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
on page 5-48. If tire rotation is recommended for the
vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace passenger compartment air
filter. See footnote (j).
•
•
•
For vehicles used for trailer towing:
Change transfer case fluid.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (severe service).
See footnotes (n) and (p).
•
•
•
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (normal service).
See footnote (n).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change brake
fluid at a regular maintenance service
every two years. See footnote (m).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-94 for more information.
Maintenance Footnotes
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints require
lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their
temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or they could be
damaged.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-72.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, hood hinges, body door hinges, rear
compartment hinges, sunroof tracks, and any folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication could be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(n) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed,
clear, and free of debris. During any maintenance, if a
power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the
underbody, care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water can
overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case
fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be replaced.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(p) Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation or taxi,
police, or delivery service.
(j) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
could require replacement more often.
Owner Checks and Services
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(m) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and
refill brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance
service every two years. This service can be complex;
you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare
to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle has the same
size tires at all four wheel positions and may be required
for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil
Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine Oil
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-23.
Front and
Rear Axle
Engine Coolant
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Manual Transmission Fluid
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Points
in Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Linkage,
Synthetic Grease with
Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Folding Seats,
in Canada 10953474).
Sunroof Tracks,
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Squeaks
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Numbers
ACDelco Part Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.6L and 4.6L engines
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6
25798271
A2944C
25177917
89017342
PF2129
PF61
4.6L V8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Particle and Odor Filter
Particle Filter
88957450
19130403
CF130C
CF133
Spark Plugs
3.6L V6
92220447
12571535
41-990
41-987
4.6L V8
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 22 in (56.5 cm)
Passenger Side – 21 in (53.3 cm)
Rear Wiper Blade – 13 in (33.0 cm)
12367281
88892785
12335716
—
—
—
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following
address:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after the following the procedure outlined
in Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a
no-charge mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors
of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining your
vehicle.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
Refer to MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within gmcanada.com.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
www.gmcanada.com
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement
of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made many times.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during
the 5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and
a copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of your
daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty in
both the U.S. and Canada.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If
you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your
dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the
allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local,
and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-96
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-15
Driving (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-38
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-24
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-42
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
